cmdr
Check-in [db133a5866]
Not logged in
Bounty program for improvements to Tcl and certain Tcl packages.
Tcl 2019 Conference, Houston/TX, US, Nov 4-8
Send your abstracts to [email protected]
or submit via the online form by Sep 9.

Many hyperlinks are disabled.
Use anonymous login to enable hyperlinks.

Overview
Comment:Regenerated embedded docs.
Timelines: family | ancestors | descendants | both | doc-expansion
Files: files | file ages | folders
SHA1: db133a58666ace81993e7b88994e15544dbf435a
User & Date: aku 2015-04-17 05:44:36
Context
2015-04-17
05:47
Bring new docs into the trunk. check-in: 6cf097e45a user: aku tags: trunk
05:44
Regenerated embedded docs. Closed-Leaf check-in: db133a5866 user: aku tags: doc-expansion
01:51
Completed new docs check-in: 57fc520fe4 user: andreask tags: doc-expansion
Changes
Hide Diffs Side-by-Side Diffs Ignore Whitespace Patch

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr \- Cmdr - Main package and API
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   \fB::cmdr\fR \fBnew\fR \fIname\fR \fIspecification\fR

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_actor.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_actor\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr::actor" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr::actor" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr::actor \- Cmdr - (Internal) Base class for officers and privates
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr::actor \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   \fB::cmdr::actor\fR \fBnew\fR

Added embedded/man/files/cmdr_ask.n.

            1  +'\"
            2  +'\" Generated from file 'cmdr_ask\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
            3  +'\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
            4  +'\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
            5  +'\"
            6  +.TH "cmdr::ask" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
           77  +.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
           78  +.nr ^l \n(.l
           79  +.ad b
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
           81  +.de AP
           82  +.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
           83  +.el \{\
           84  +.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
           85  +.   el          .TP 15
           86  +.\}
           87  +.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
           88  +.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
           90  +.\".b
           91  +.\}
           92  +.el \{\
           93  +.br
           94  +.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
           95  +\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
           96  +.\}
           97  +.el \{\
           98  +\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
           99  +.\}
          100  +.\}
          101  +..
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          103  +.de AS
          104  +.nr )A 10n
          105  +.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
          106  +.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
          107  +.\"
          108  +.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
          109  +.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
          110  +..
          111  +.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
          115  +.de BS
          116  +.br
          117  +.mk ^y
          118  +.nr ^b 1u
          119  +.if n .nf
          120  +.if n .ti 0
          121  +.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
          122  +.if n .fi
          123  +..
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          125  +.de BE
          126  +.nf
          127  +.ti 0
          128  +.mk ^t
          129  +.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
          130  +.el \{\
          131  +.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
          132  +.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
          133  +.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
          134  +\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
          135  +.\}
          136  +.el \}\
          137  +\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
          138  +.\}
          139  +.\}
          140  +.fi
          141  +.br
          142  +.nr ^b 0
          143  +..
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          147  +.de VS
          148  +.if !"\\$2"" .br
          149  +.mk ^Y
          150  +.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
          151  +.el .nr ^v 1u
          152  +..
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          154  +.de VE
          155  +.ie n 'mc
          156  +.el \{\
          157  +.ev 2
          158  +.nf
          159  +.ti 0
          160  +.mk ^t
          161  +\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
          162  +.sp -1
          163  +.fi
          164  +.ev
          165  +.\}
          166  +.nr ^v 0
          167  +..
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
          171  +.de ^B
          172  +.ev 2
          173  +'ti 0
          174  +'nf
          175  +.mk ^t
          176  +.if \\n(^b \{\
          177  +.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
          178  +.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
          179  +.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
          180  +.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
          181  +.\}
          182  +.if \\n(^v \{\
          183  +.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
          184  +\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
          185  +.\}
          186  +.bp
          187  +'fi
          188  +.ev
          189  +.if \\n(^b \{\
          190  +.mk ^y
          191  +.nr ^b 2
          192  +.\}
          193  +.if \\n(^v \{\
          194  +.mk ^Y
          195  +.\}
          196  +..
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
          198  +.de DS
          199  +.RS
          200  +.nf
          201  +.sp
          202  +..
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
          204  +.de DE
          205  +.fi
          206  +.RE
          207  +.sp
          208  +..
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          210  +.de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
          213  +.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
          214  +.LP
          215  +.nf
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
          217  +.ft B
          218  +..
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          220  +.de SE
          221  +.fi
          222  +.ft R
          223  +.LP
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
          225  +..
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          227  +.de OP
          228  +.LP
          229  +.nf
          230  +.ta 4c
          231  +Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
          232  +Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
          233  +Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
          234  +.fi
          235  +.IP
          236  +..
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          238  +.de CS
          239  +.RS
          240  +.nf
          241  +.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
          242  +..
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          244  +.de CE
          245  +.fi
          246  +.RE
          247  +..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
          249  +.de UL
          250  +\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
          251  +..
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
          274  +.BS
          275  +.SH NAME
          276  +cmdr::ask \- Cmdr - Terminal-based simple user interactions
          277  +.SH SYNOPSIS
          278  +package require \fBcmdr::color \fR
          279  +.sp
          280  +package require \fBlinenoise \fR
          281  +.sp
          282  +package require \fBstruct::matrix \fR
          283  +.sp
          284  +package require \fBtextutil::adjust \fR
          285  +.sp
          286  +package require \fBtry \fR
          287  +.sp
          288  +package require \fBcmdr::ask \fR
          289  +.sp
          290  +\fB::cmdr::ask\fR \fBstring\fR \fIquery\fR ?\fIdefault\fR?
          291  +.sp
          292  +\fB::cmdr::ask\fR \fBstring/extended\fR \fIquery\fR ?options\&.\&.\&.?
          293  +.sp
          294  +\fB::cmdr::ask\fR \fBstring*\fR \fIquery\fR
          295  +.sp
          296  +\fB::cmdr::ask\fR \fByn\fR \fIquery\fR ?\fIdefault\fR?
          297  +.sp
          298  +\fB::cmdr::ask\fR \fBchoose\fR \fIquery\fR \fIchoices\fR ?\fIdefault\fR?
          299  +.sp
          300  +\fB::cmdr::ask\fR \fBmenu\fR \fIheader\fR \fIprompt\fR \fIchoices\fR ?\fIdefault\fR?
          301  +.sp
          302  +.BE
          303  +.SH DESCRIPTION
          304  +.PP
          305  +Welcome to the Cmdr project, written by Andreas Kupries\&.
          306  +.PP
          307  +For availability please read \fICmdr - How To Get The Sources\fR\&.
          308  +.PP
          309  +This package provides a few utility commands implementing a few simple
          310  +terminal-based interactions with the user\&.
          311  +.SH API
          312  +.TP
          313  +\fB::cmdr::ask\fR \fBstring\fR \fIquery\fR ?\fIdefault\fR?
          314  +When invoked this command prompts the user with \fIquery\fR for a string\&.
          315  +If the \fIdefault\fR is specified and not the empty string it is also
          316  +shown as part of the prompt\&. Note that \fIdefault\fR defaults to the
          317  +empty string\&.
          318  +.sp
          319  +The interactively entered string is returned as the result of the
          320  +command\&. The \fIdefault\fR is returned as the result if the user entered
          321  +an empty string and the \fIdefault\fR is not empty\&.
          322  +.RS
          323  +.TP
          324  +string \fIquery\fR
          325  +The prompt to show to the user before interaction begins\&.
          326  +.TP
          327  +string \fIdefault\fR
          328  +The default to return if the user enters nothing\&.
          329  +.RE
          330  +.TP
          331  +\fB::cmdr::ask\fR \fBstring/extended\fR \fIquery\fR ?options\&.\&.\&.?
          332  +This command is similar to \fB::cmdr::ask string\fR, except it allows for
          333  +more customization of the interaction through options\&.
          334  +.sp
          335  +The accepted options are
          336  +.RS
          337  +.TP
          338  +\fB-history\fR boolean
          339  +If \fBtrue\fR, save user input into \fBlinenoise\fR's in-memory history\&. Default is \fBfalse\fR\&.
          340  +.TP
          341  +\fB-hidden\fR boolean
          342  +If \fBtrue\fR, input is hidden\&. Default is \fBfalse\fR, visible echo\&.
          343  +.TP
          344  +\fB-complete\fR cmdprefix
          345  +If not empty, installed as completion callback\&.
          346  +.TP
          347  +\fB-default\fR string
          348  +If not empty the string to return if the user enters the empty string\&.
          349  +.RE
          350  +.RS
          351  +.TP
          352  +string \fIquery\fR
          353  +The prompt to show to the user before interaction begins\&.
          354  +.RE
          355  +.TP
          356  +\fB::cmdr::ask\fR \fBstring*\fR \fIquery\fR
          357  +Behaves like \fB::cmdr::ask string\fR without a default, except that the user's
          358  +input is not echoed back to the terminal\&. This command is for the entry of hidden
          359  +strings, i\&.e\&. passwords, and the like\&.
          360  +.RS
          361  +.TP
          362  +string \fIquery\fR
          363  +The prompt to show to the user before interaction begins\&.
          364  +.RE
          365  +.TP
          366  +\fB::cmdr::ask\fR \fByn\fR \fIquery\fR ?\fIdefault\fR?
          367  +When invoked this command prompts the user with \fIquery\fR for a \fIboolean\fR
          368  +value/string\&. If the \fIdefault\fR is specified and not the empty string it is
          369  +also shown as part of the prompt\&. Note that \fIdefault\fR defaults to the empty
          370  +string\&.
          371  +.sp
          372  +The interactively entered boolean is returned as the result of the command\&.
          373  +The \fIdefault\fR boolean is returned as the result if the user entered an empty
          374  +string and the \fIdefault\fR is not empty\&.
          375  +.sp
          376  +Note that the command will not return until the user entered a valid
          377  +boolean value\&. Entering a non-boolean string causes the command to loop internally
          378  +and re-prompt\&.
          379  +.RS
          380  +.TP
          381  +string \fIquery\fR
          382  +The prompt to show to the user before interaction begins\&.
          383  +.TP
          384  +string \fIdefault\fR
          385  +The default boolean to return if the user enters nothing\&.
          386  +.RE
          387  +.TP
          388  +\fB::cmdr::ask\fR \fBchoose\fR \fIquery\fR \fIchoices\fR ?\fIdefault\fR?
          389  +When invoked this command prompts the user with \fIquery\fR for one of the
          390  +\fIchoices\fR, entered as string\&. Prompt and input happen on a single line\&.
          391  +.sp
          392  +The interactively entered choice is returned as the result of the command\&.
          393  +The \fIdefault\fR choice is returned as the result if the user entered an empty
          394  +string and the \fIdefault\fR is not empty\&.
          395  +.sp
          396  +Note that the command will not return until the user entered a valid
          397  +choice\&. Entering a non-choice causes the command to loop internally and re-prompt\&.
          398  +The user is supported in entry by an internal completion callback\&.
          399  +.RS
          400  +.TP
          401  +string \fIquery\fR
          402  +The prompt to show to the user before interaction begins\&.
          403  +.TP
          404  +string \fIdefault\fR
          405  +The default boolean to return if the user enters nothing\&.
          406  +.RE
          407  +.TP
          408  +\fB::cmdr::ask\fR \fBmenu\fR \fIheader\fR \fIprompt\fR \fIchoices\fR ?\fIdefault\fR?
          409  +Similar to \fB::cmdr::ask choose\fR, except that the \fIchoices\fR are shown
          410  +as an enumerated menu, one per line, with a leading \fIheader\fR\&.
          411  +Furthermore the command accepts not only the choices as input, but also their
          412  +numeric indices in the menu\&. The result however is always the relevant chosen string\&.
          413  +.PP
          414  +.SH "BUGS, IDEAS, FEEDBACK"
          415  +Both the package(s) and this documentation will undoubtedly contain
          416  +bugs and other problems\&.
          417  +Please report such at
          418  +\fICmdr Tickets\fR [https:/core\&.tcl\&.tk/akupries/cmdr]\&.
          419  +.PP
          420  +Please also report any ideas you may have for enhancements of
          421  +either package(s) and/or documentation\&.
          422  +.SH KEYWORDS
          423  +arguments, command hierarchy, command line completion, command line handling, command tree, editing command line, help for command line, hierarchy of commands, interactive command shell, optional arguments, options, parameters, processing command line, tree of commands
          424  +.SH COPYRIGHT
          425  +.nf
          426  +Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
          427  +Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
          428  +
          429  +.fi

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_changes.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_changes\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr-changes" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr-changes" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr-changes \- Cmdr - Log of Changes
   246    277   .SH DESCRIPTION
   247    278   .PP
   248    279   Welcome to the Cmdr project, written by Andreas Kupries\&.
   249    280   .PP

Added embedded/man/files/cmdr_color.n.

            1  +'\"
            2  +'\" Generated from file 'cmdr_color\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
            3  +'\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
            4  +'\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
            5  +'\"
            6  +.TH "cmdr::color" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
           77  +.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
           78  +.nr ^l \n(.l
           79  +.ad b
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
           81  +.de AP
           82  +.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
           83  +.el \{\
           84  +.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
           85  +.   el          .TP 15
           86  +.\}
           87  +.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
           88  +.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
           90  +.\".b
           91  +.\}
           92  +.el \{\
           93  +.br
           94  +.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
           95  +\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
           96  +.\}
           97  +.el \{\
           98  +\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
           99  +.\}
          100  +.\}
          101  +..
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          103  +.de AS
          104  +.nr )A 10n
          105  +.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
          106  +.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
          107  +.\"
          108  +.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
          109  +.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
          110  +..
          111  +.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
          115  +.de BS
          116  +.br
          117  +.mk ^y
          118  +.nr ^b 1u
          119  +.if n .nf
          120  +.if n .ti 0
          121  +.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
          122  +.if n .fi
          123  +..
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          125  +.de BE
          126  +.nf
          127  +.ti 0
          128  +.mk ^t
          129  +.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
          130  +.el \{\
          131  +.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
          132  +.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
          133  +.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
          134  +\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
          135  +.\}
          136  +.el \}\
          137  +\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
          138  +.\}
          139  +.\}
          140  +.fi
          141  +.br
          142  +.nr ^b 0
          143  +..
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          147  +.de VS
          148  +.if !"\\$2"" .br
          149  +.mk ^Y
          150  +.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
          151  +.el .nr ^v 1u
          152  +..
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          154  +.de VE
          155  +.ie n 'mc
          156  +.el \{\
          157  +.ev 2
          158  +.nf
          159  +.ti 0
          160  +.mk ^t
          161  +\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
          162  +.sp -1
          163  +.fi
          164  +.ev
          165  +.\}
          166  +.nr ^v 0
          167  +..
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
          171  +.de ^B
          172  +.ev 2
          173  +'ti 0
          174  +'nf
          175  +.mk ^t
          176  +.if \\n(^b \{\
          177  +.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
          178  +.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
          179  +.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
          180  +.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
          181  +.\}
          182  +.if \\n(^v \{\
          183  +.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
          184  +\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
          185  +.\}
          186  +.bp
          187  +'fi
          188  +.ev
          189  +.if \\n(^b \{\
          190  +.mk ^y
          191  +.nr ^b 2
          192  +.\}
          193  +.if \\n(^v \{\
          194  +.mk ^Y
          195  +.\}
          196  +..
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
          198  +.de DS
          199  +.RS
          200  +.nf
          201  +.sp
          202  +..
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
          204  +.de DE
          205  +.fi
          206  +.RE
          207  +.sp
          208  +..
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          210  +.de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
          213  +.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
          214  +.LP
          215  +.nf
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
          217  +.ft B
          218  +..
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          220  +.de SE
          221  +.fi
          222  +.ft R
          223  +.LP
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
          225  +..
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          227  +.de OP
          228  +.LP
          229  +.nf
          230  +.ta 4c
          231  +Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
          232  +Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
          233  +Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
          234  +.fi
          235  +.IP
          236  +..
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          238  +.de CS
          239  +.RS
          240  +.nf
          241  +.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
          242  +..
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          244  +.de CE
          245  +.fi
          246  +.RE
          247  +..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
          249  +.de UL
          250  +\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
          251  +..
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
          274  +.BS
          275  +.SH NAME
          276  +cmdr::color \- Cmdr - Terminal colors
          277  +.SH SYNOPSIS
          278  +package require \fBcmdr::tty \fR
          279  +.sp
          280  +package require \fBcmdr::color \fR
          281  +.sp
          282  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBactivate\fR ?\fIenable\fR?
          283  +.sp
          284  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBactive\fR
          285  +.sp
          286  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBnames\fR
          287  +.sp
          288  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBget\fR \fIname\fR
          289  +.sp
          290  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBget-def\fR \fIname\fR
          291  +.sp
          292  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBdefine\fR \fIname\fR \fIspec\fR
          293  +.sp
          294  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBexists\fR \fIname\fR
          295  +.sp
          296  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBunset\fR \fIname\fR
          297  +.sp
          298  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fB\&.\&.\&.\fR \fItext\fR
          299  +.sp
          300  +.BE
          301  +.SH DESCRIPTION
          302  +.PP
          303  +Welcome to the Cmdr project, written by Andreas Kupries\&.
          304  +.PP
          305  +For availability please read \fICmdr - How To Get The Sources\fR\&.
          306  +.PP
          307  +This package provides a few utility commands implementing
          308  +the management of terminal colors\&.
          309  +.SH API
          310  +.TP
          311  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBactivate\fR ?\fIenable\fR?
          312  +When invoked this command enables or disables color handling,
          313  +as per the boolean flag \fIenable\fR\&. If \fIenable\fR is not
          314  +specified the action defaults to activation\&.
          315  +.sp
          316  +The result of the command is the new activation state\&.
          317  +.sp
          318  +The default activation state of the package after loading
          319  +depends on \fBstdout\fR\&. The package is active if \fBstdout\fR
          320  +is a terminal, and inactive otherwise\&.
          321  +.RS
          322  +.TP
          323  +boolean \fIenable\fR
          324  +If set, enable color handling, else disable it\&.
          325  +.RE
          326  +.TP
          327  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBactive\fR
          328  +The result of this command is the current activation state
          329  +of the package\&.
          330  +.sp
          331  +The default activation state of the package after loading
          332  +depends on \fBstdout\fR\&. The package is active if \fBstdout\fR
          333  +is a terminal, and inactive otherwise\&.
          334  +.TP
          335  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBnames\fR
          336  +When invoked this command returns a list of the symbolic color
          337  +names known to the package\&.
          338  +.TP
          339  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBget\fR \fIname\fR
          340  +When invoked this command returns the character sequence
          341  +associated with the symbolic color \fIname\fR\&. An error
          342  +is thrown if \fIname\fR is not a known symbol\&.
          343  +.TP
          344  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBget-def\fR \fIname\fR
          345  +When invoked this command returns the specification
          346  +associated with the symbolic color \fIname\fR\&. An error
          347  +is thrown if \fIname\fR is not a known symbol\&.
          348  +.TP
          349  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBdefine\fR \fIname\fR \fIspec\fR
          350  +When invoked this command defines the color \fIname\fR\&. If \fIname\fR
          351  +exists already its previous specification is overwritten\&.
          352  +The command accepts four forms of \fIspec\fRifications, namely:
          353  +.RS
          354  +.TP
          355  +=\fBrname\fR
          356  +The \fIrname\fR must be the name of a known color\&.
          357  +The \fIname\fR itself is not allowed, i\&.e\&. self-references are forbidden\&.
          358  +.TP
          359  +%\fBR\fR,\fBG\fR,\fBB\fR
          360  +The \fIR\fR, \fIG\fR, and \fIB\fR values are integers in the range
          361  +\fB0\fR\&.\&.\&.\fB5\fR directly specifying the chosen color\&. These
          362  +specifications may not work if the terminal is not configured to
          363  +support 256 colors\&.
          364  +.TP
          365  +[Ee]\fBcode\fR(,\&.\&.\&.)
          366  +The value is a comma-separated list of ANSI color control characters\&.
          367  +.TP
          368  +*
          369  +Any other string is acceptable too, and used as is\&.
          370  +.RE
          371  +.TP
          372  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBexists\fR \fIname\fR
          373  +When invoked this command tests if the symbolic color \fIname\fR
          374  +is known, returns the boolean value \fBtrue\fR if so, and
          375  +\fBfalse\fR else\&.
          376  +.TP
          377  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fBunset\fR \fIname\fR
          378  +When invoked this command deletes the symbolic color \fIname\fR\&.
          379  +An error is thrown if \fIname\fR is not a known symbol\&.
          380  +The command returns the empty string as its result\&.
          381  +.TP
          382  +\fB::cmdr::color\fR \fB\&.\&.\&.\fR \fItext\fR
          383  +When \fB::cmdr::color\fR is invoked with an unknown method name
          384  +then this name is expected to be and treated as a list of known
          385  +symbolic color names\&. These colors are applied to the \fItext\fR
          386  +and the modified text is returned as the result of the command\&.
          387  +.sp
          388  +An error is thrown if any of the specified color symbols
          389  +are not known\&.
          390  +.PP
          391  +.SH "PREDEFINED COLORS"
          392  +The following colors are defined by the package itself:
          393  +.TP
          394  +black
          395  +e30
          396  +.TP
          397  +red
          398  +e31
          399  +.TP
          400  +green
          401  +e32
          402  +.TP
          403  +yellow
          404  +e33
          405  +.TP
          406  +blue
          407  +e34
          408  +.TP
          409  +magenta
          410  +e35
          411  +.TP
          412  +cyan
          413  +e36
          414  +.TP
          415  +white
          416  +e37
          417  +.TP
          418  +default
          419  +e39
          420  +.TP
          421  +bg-black
          422  +e40
          423  +.TP
          424  +bg-red
          425  +e41
          426  +.TP
          427  +bg-green
          428  +e42
          429  +.TP
          430  +bg-yellow
          431  +e43
          432  +.TP
          433  +bg-blue
          434  +e44
          435  +.TP
          436  +bg-magenta
          437  +e45
          438  +.TP
          439  +bg-cyan
          440  +e46
          441  +.TP
          442  +bg-white
          443  +e47
          444  +.TP
          445  +bg-default
          446  +e49
          447  +.TP
          448  +bold
          449  +e1
          450  +.TP
          451  +dim
          452  +e2
          453  +.TP
          454  +italic
          455  +e3
          456  +.TP
          457  +underline
          458  +e4
          459  +.TP
          460  +blink
          461  +e5
          462  +.TP
          463  +revers
          464  +e7
          465  +.TP
          466  +hidden
          467  +e8
          468  +.TP
          469  +strike
          470  +e9
          471  +.TP
          472  +no-bold
          473  +e21
          474  +.TP
          475  +no-dim
          476  +e22
          477  +.TP
          478  +no-italic
          479  +e23
          480  +.TP
          481  +no-underline
          482  +e24
          483  +.TP
          484  +no-blink
          485  +e25
          486  +.TP
          487  +no-revers
          488  +e27
          489  +.TP
          490  +no-hidden
          491  +e28
          492  +.TP
          493  +no-strike
          494  +e29
          495  +.TP
          496  +reset
          497  +e0
          498  +.TP
          499  +advisory
          500  +=yellow
          501  +.TP
          502  +bad
          503  +=red
          504  +.TP
          505  +confirm
          506  +=red
          507  +.TP
          508  +error
          509  +=magenta
          510  +.TP
          511  +good
          512  +=green
          513  +.TP
          514  +name
          515  +=blue
          516  +.TP
          517  +neutral
          518  +=blue
          519  +.TP
          520  +no
          521  +=red
          522  +.TP
          523  +note
          524  +=blue
          525  +.TP
          526  +number
          527  +=green
          528  +.TP
          529  +prompt
          530  +=blue
          531  +.TP
          532  +unknown
          533  +=cyan
          534  +.TP
          535  +warning
          536  +=yellow
          537  +.TP
          538  +yes
          539  +=green
          540  +.PP
          541  +.SH "BUGS, IDEAS, FEEDBACK"
          542  +Both the package(s) and this documentation will undoubtedly contain
          543  +bugs and other problems\&.
          544  +Please report such at
          545  +\fICmdr Tickets\fR [https:/core\&.tcl\&.tk/akupries/cmdr]\&.
          546  +.PP
          547  +Please also report any ideas you may have for enhancements of
          548  +either package(s) and/or documentation\&.
          549  +.SH KEYWORDS
          550  +arguments, command hierarchy, command line completion, command line handling, command tree, editing command line, help for command line, hierarchy of commands, interactive command shell, optional arguments, options, parameters, processing command line, tree of commands
          551  +.SH COPYRIGHT
          552  +.nf
          553  +Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
          554  +Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
          555  +
          556  +.fi

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_config.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_config\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr::config" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr::config" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr::config \- Cmdr - (Partially internal) Collection of parameters for privates
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr::config \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   \fB::cmdr::config\fR \fBnew\fR \fIcontext\fR \fIspec\fR

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_dev_completion.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_dev_completion\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr_dev~completion" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr_dev~completion" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr_dev~completion \- Cmdr - Internals of command line completion
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   .BE

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_dev_dsl.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_dev_dsl\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr_dev~dsl" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr_dev~dsl" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr_dev~dsl \- Cmdr - Internals of DSL handling
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   .BE

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_dsl.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_dsl\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr-spec-dsl" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr-spec-dsl" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr-spec-dsl \- Cmdr - Introduction to the Specification Language
   246    277   .SH DESCRIPTION
   247    278   .PP
   248    279   Welcome to the Cmdr project, written by Andreas Kupries\&.
   249    280   .PP
................................................................................
   444    475   	manager remove $name
   445    476   	say [color green "Successfully unaliased '$name'"]
   446    477       }
   447    478       return
   448    479   }
   449    480   
   450    481   # # ## ### ##### ######## ############# #####################
   451         -package provide \
   452         -        foo::backend::alias 0
   453         -# 2 lines, hidden from kettle scanner.
          482  +package provide  foo::backend::alias 0
          483  +# 2 lines, hidden from kettle scanner\&.
   454    484   
   455    485   .CE
   456    486   .SH "LANGUAGE REFERENCE"
   457    487   With the examples behind us we can now go and specify the entire
   458    488   specification language\&. If you have skipped here on first reading,
   459    489   ignoring the examples, please go back and read them first\&.
   460    490   .PP

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_dsl_officer.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_dsl_officer\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr-spec-dsl-officer" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr-spec-dsl-officer" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr-spec-dsl-officer \- Cmdr - Officer Specification Language
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   \fBalias\fR \fIname\fR \fB=\fR \fIname'\fR\&.\&.\&.
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   \fBalias\fR \fIname\fR

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_dsl_parameter.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_dsl_parameter\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr-spec-dsl-parameter" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr-spec-dsl-parameter" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr-spec-dsl-parameter \- Cmdr - Parameter Specification Language
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   \fBlabel\fR \fItext\fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   \fBalias\fR \fIname\fR

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_dsl_private.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_dsl_private\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr-spec-dsl-private" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr-spec-dsl-private" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr-spec-dsl-private \- Cmdr - Private Specification Language
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   \fBdescription\fR \fItext\fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   \fBinput\fR \fIname\fR \fIhelp\fR \fIscript\fR

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_flow.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_flow\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr-spec-flow" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr-spec-flow" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr-spec-flow \- Cmdr - Runtime Processing Flow
   246    277   .SH DESCRIPTION
   247    278   .PP
   248    279   Welcome to the Cmdr project, written by Andreas Kupries\&.
   249    280   .PP
................................................................................
   456    487   This can be used to modulate command messages and other
   457    488   context-dependent things\&.
   458    489   .sp
   459    490   \fINote\fR that the block will not exist until after the first
   460    491   shell was active\&. This means that a missing \fB*in-shell*\fR block
   461    492   should be treated like \fBfalse\fR\&.
   462    493   .TP
          494  +\fB*config*\fR
          495  +This block is read-only, and only found in the root actor\&.
          496  +Its value is managed by the framework, specifically by privates\&.
          497  +.sp
          498  +It is a command name, i\&.e\&. object handle, to the active
          499  +instance of \fBcmdr::config\fR\&. For regular parameters that is the
          500  +same handle given to them in their various callbacks\&. For a global
          501  +parameter however the active config object is what the parameter is
          502  +currently used by, whereas the callback argument is where it was
          503  +defined in and inherited from\&.
          504  +.sp
          505  +This distinction is important when the global parameter has to
          506  +look at and work with non-global parameters of the active
          507  +private\&. These can only be found in the active context\&.
          508  +.TP
   463    509   \fB*prefix*\fR
   464    510   This block is read-only and found in the private actor for the
   465    511   currently executing action command prefix, accessible through the
   466    512   \fBcmdr::config\fR instance method \fBcontext\fR\&.
   467    513   Its value is managed by the framework\&.
   468    514   It is a list of the command names used to reach the \fIprivate\fR
   469    515   instance\&.

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_help.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_help\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr::help" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr::help" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr::help \- Cmdr - (Internal) Utilities for help text formatting and setup
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr::help \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   \fB::cmdr::help\fR \fBauto\fR \fIactor\fR

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_help_json.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_help_json\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr::help::json" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr::help::json" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr::help::json \- Cmdr - Formatting help as JSON object
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr::help::json \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   .BE

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_help_sql.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_help_sql\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr::help::sql" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr::help::sql" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr::help::sql \- Cmdr - Formatting help as series of SQL commands
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr::help::sql \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   .BE

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_help_tcl.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_help_tcl\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr::help::tcl" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr::help::tcl" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr::help::tcl \- Cmdr - Formatting help as Tcl data structure
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr::help::tcl \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   .BE

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_helpformats.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_helpformats\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr-user-helpformats" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr-user-helpformats" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr-user-helpformats \- Cmdr - Writing custom help formats
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr::help \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   \fB::cmdr::help::format::<foo>\fR \fIroot\fR \fIwidth\fR \fIhelp\fR

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_howto_development.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_howto_development\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr_development" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr_development" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr_development \- Cmdr - The Developer's Guide
   246    277   .SH DESCRIPTION
   247    278   .PP
   248    279   Welcome to the Cmdr project, written by Andreas Kupries\&.
   249    280   .PP
................................................................................
   502    533   dictionary mapping from toplevel section/category names to an integer
   503    534   number to override the natural order of displaying these sections in
   504    535   the help\&.
   505    536   .sp
   506    537   The details are explained in section \fIFormat Notes\fR of
   507    538   \fICmdr - (Internal) Utilities for help text formatting and setup\fR\&.
   508    539   .TP
          540  +\fB*config*\fR
          541  +Publicly documented for users as read-only this block's value is
          542  +managed by the framework, and only found in the root actor\&.
          543  +.sp
          544  +It is a command name, i\&.e\&. object handle, to the active
          545  +instance of \fBcmdr::config\fR\&. For regular parameters that is the
          546  +same handle given to them in their various callbacks\&. For a global
          547  +parameter however the active config object is what the parameter is
          548  +currently used by, whereas the callback argument is where it was
          549  +defined in and inherited from\&.
          550  +.sp
          551  +This distinction is important when the global parameter has to
          552  +look at and work with non-global parameters of the active
          553  +private\&. These can only be found in the active context\&.
          554  +.TP
   509    555   \fB*prefix*\fR
   510    556   Publicly documented for users as read-only this block's value is
   511    557   managed by the framework\&.
   512    558   Set during the \fIDispatch\fR phase it provides to access to the
   513    559   actual command name used to invoke a \fIprivate\fR\&.
   514    560   .sp
   515    561   See also section \fIExecution\fR of \fICmdr - Runtime Processing Flow\fR\&.

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_howto_get_sources.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_howto_get_sources\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr-howto-get-sources" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr-howto-get-sources" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr-howto-get-sources \- Cmdr - How To Get The Sources
   246    277   .SH DESCRIPTION
   247    278   .PP
   248    279   Welcome to the Cmdr project, written by Andreas Kupries\&.
   249    280   .PP

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_howto_installation.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_howto_installation\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr-installation" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr-installation" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr-installation \- Cmdr - The Installer's Guide
   246    277   .SH DESCRIPTION
   247    278   .PP
   248    279   Welcome to the Cmdr project, written by Andreas Kupries\&.
   249    280   .PP

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_introduction.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_introduction\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr-introduction" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr-introduction" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr-introduction \- Cmdr - Introduction to the project
   246    277   .SH DESCRIPTION
   247    278   .PP
   248    279   Welcome to the Cmdr project, written by Andreas Kupries\&.
   249    280   .PP

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_license.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_license\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr-license" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr-license" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr-license \- Cmdr - License
   246    277   .SH DESCRIPTION
   247    278   .PP
   248    279   Welcome to the Cmdr project, written by Andreas Kupries\&.
   249    280   .PP

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_officer.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_officer\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr::officer" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr::officer" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr::officer \- Cmdr - (Internal) Aggregation of multiple commands for dispatch\&.
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr::officer \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   \fB::cmdr::officer\fR \fBnew\fR \fIsuper\fR \fIname\fR \fIactions\fR

Added embedded/man/files/cmdr_pager.n.

            1  +'\"
            2  +'\" Generated from file 'cmdr_pager\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
            3  +'\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
            4  +'\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
            5  +'\"
            6  +.TH "cmdr::pager" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
           77  +.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
           78  +.nr ^l \n(.l
           79  +.ad b
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
           81  +.de AP
           82  +.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
           83  +.el \{\
           84  +.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
           85  +.   el          .TP 15
           86  +.\}
           87  +.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
           88  +.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
           90  +.\".b
           91  +.\}
           92  +.el \{\
           93  +.br
           94  +.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
           95  +\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
           96  +.\}
           97  +.el \{\
           98  +\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
           99  +.\}
          100  +.\}
          101  +..
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          103  +.de AS
          104  +.nr )A 10n
          105  +.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
          106  +.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
          107  +.\"
          108  +.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
          109  +.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
          110  +..
          111  +.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
          115  +.de BS
          116  +.br
          117  +.mk ^y
          118  +.nr ^b 1u
          119  +.if n .nf
          120  +.if n .ti 0
          121  +.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
          122  +.if n .fi
          123  +..
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          125  +.de BE
          126  +.nf
          127  +.ti 0
          128  +.mk ^t
          129  +.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
          130  +.el \{\
          131  +.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
          132  +.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
          133  +.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
          134  +\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
          135  +.\}
          136  +.el \}\
          137  +\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
          138  +.\}
          139  +.\}
          140  +.fi
          141  +.br
          142  +.nr ^b 0
          143  +..
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          147  +.de VS
          148  +.if !"\\$2"" .br
          149  +.mk ^Y
          150  +.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
          151  +.el .nr ^v 1u
          152  +..
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          154  +.de VE
          155  +.ie n 'mc
          156  +.el \{\
          157  +.ev 2
          158  +.nf
          159  +.ti 0
          160  +.mk ^t
          161  +\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
          162  +.sp -1
          163  +.fi
          164  +.ev
          165  +.\}
          166  +.nr ^v 0
          167  +..
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
          171  +.de ^B
          172  +.ev 2
          173  +'ti 0
          174  +'nf
          175  +.mk ^t
          176  +.if \\n(^b \{\
          177  +.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
          178  +.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
          179  +.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
          180  +.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
          181  +.\}
          182  +.if \\n(^v \{\
          183  +.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
          184  +\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
          185  +.\}
          186  +.bp
          187  +'fi
          188  +.ev
          189  +.if \\n(^b \{\
          190  +.mk ^y
          191  +.nr ^b 2
          192  +.\}
          193  +.if \\n(^v \{\
          194  +.mk ^Y
          195  +.\}
          196  +..
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
          198  +.de DS
          199  +.RS
          200  +.nf
          201  +.sp
          202  +..
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
          204  +.de DE
          205  +.fi
          206  +.RE
          207  +.sp
          208  +..
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          210  +.de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
          213  +.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
          214  +.LP
          215  +.nf
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
          217  +.ft B
          218  +..
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          220  +.de SE
          221  +.fi
          222  +.ft R
          223  +.LP
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
          225  +..
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          227  +.de OP
          228  +.LP
          229  +.nf
          230  +.ta 4c
          231  +Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
          232  +Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
          233  +Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
          234  +.fi
          235  +.IP
          236  +..
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          238  +.de CS
          239  +.RS
          240  +.nf
          241  +.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
          242  +..
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          244  +.de CE
          245  +.fi
          246  +.RE
          247  +..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
          249  +.de UL
          250  +\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
          251  +..
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
          274  +.BS
          275  +.SH NAME
          276  +cmdr::pager \- Cmdr - Paging long output
          277  +.SH SYNOPSIS
          278  +package require \fBlinenoise \fR
          279  +.sp
          280  +package require \fBcmdr::tty \fR
          281  +.sp
          282  +package require \fBcmdr::pager \fR
          283  +.sp
          284  +\fB::cmdr::pager\fR \fBtext\fR
          285  +.sp
          286  +.BE
          287  +.SH DESCRIPTION
          288  +.PP
          289  +Welcome to the Cmdr project, written by Andreas Kupries\&.
          290  +.PP
          291  +For availability please read \fICmdr - How To Get The Sources\fR\&.
          292  +.PP
          293  +This package provides a single utility command to manage the automatic
          294  +paging of long output, like cmdr's automatic help\&.
          295  +.SH API
          296  +.TP
          297  +\fB::cmdr::pager\fR \fBtext\fR
          298  +When invoked this command either simply prints the \fItext\fR to stdout,
          299  +or invokes an external pager application to manage the output\&.
          300  +.sp
          301  +The pager is only invoked when
          302  +.RS
          303  +.IP [1]
          304  +Stdout is a terminal, and
          305  +.IP [2]
          306  +The text does not fit into the height of the terminal, and
          307  +.IP [3]
          308  +a pager application could be found\&.
          309  +.RE
          310  +.sp
          311  +If any of the above conditions fail the text is simply printed\&.
          312  +.sp
          313  +When the command comes to the third condition above it will look
          314  +for the pager specified in the environment variable \fBPAGER\fR first,
          315  +and then \fBless\fR and \fBmore\fR, in this order\&.
          316  +.RS
          317  +.TP
          318  +string \fItext\fR
          319  +The text to print or page\&.
          320  +.RE
          321  +.sp
          322  +The result of the command is the empty string\&.
          323  +.PP
          324  +.SH "BUGS, IDEAS, FEEDBACK"
          325  +Both the package(s) and this documentation will undoubtedly contain
          326  +bugs and other problems\&.
          327  +Please report such at
          328  +\fICmdr Tickets\fR [https:/core\&.tcl\&.tk/akupries/cmdr]\&.
          329  +.PP
          330  +Please also report any ideas you may have for enhancements of
          331  +either package(s) and/or documentation\&.
          332  +.SH KEYWORDS
          333  +arguments, command hierarchy, command line completion, command line handling, command tree, editing command line, help for command line, hierarchy of commands, interactive command shell, optional arguments, options, parameters, processing command line, tree of commands
          334  +.SH COPYRIGHT
          335  +.nf
          336  +Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
          337  +Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
          338  +
          339  +.fi

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_parameter.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_parameter\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr::parameter" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr::parameter" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr::parameter \- Cmdr - (Partially internal) Command parameters
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr::parameter \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   \fB::cmdr::parameter\fR \fBnew\fR \fIconfig\fR \fIorder\fR \fIcmdline\fR \fIrequired\fR \fIdefered\fR \fIname\fR \fIdescription\fR \fIspec\fR

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_private.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_private\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr::private" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr::private" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr::private \- Cmdr - (Internal) Single command handling, options, and arguments
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr::private \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   \fB::cmdr::private\fR \fBnew\fR \fIsuper\fR \fIname\fR \fIarguments\fR \fIaction\fR

Added embedded/man/files/cmdr_tty.n.

            1  +'\"
            2  +'\" Generated from file 'cmdr_tty\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
            3  +'\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
            4  +'\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
            5  +'\"
            6  +.TH "cmdr::tty" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
           77  +.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
           78  +.nr ^l \n(.l
           79  +.ad b
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
           81  +.de AP
           82  +.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
           83  +.el \{\
           84  +.   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
           85  +.   el          .TP 15
           86  +.\}
           87  +.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
           88  +.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
           90  +.\".b
           91  +.\}
           92  +.el \{\
           93  +.br
           94  +.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
           95  +\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
           96  +.\}
           97  +.el \{\
           98  +\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
           99  +.\}
          100  +.\}
          101  +..
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          103  +.de AS
          104  +.nr )A 10n
          105  +.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
          106  +.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
          107  +.\"
          108  +.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
          109  +.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
          110  +..
          111  +.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
          115  +.de BS
          116  +.br
          117  +.mk ^y
          118  +.nr ^b 1u
          119  +.if n .nf
          120  +.if n .ti 0
          121  +.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
          122  +.if n .fi
          123  +..
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          125  +.de BE
          126  +.nf
          127  +.ti 0
          128  +.mk ^t
          129  +.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
          130  +.el \{\
          131  +.\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
          132  +.\"	box if the box started on an earlier page.
          133  +.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
          134  +\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
          135  +.\}
          136  +.el \}\
          137  +\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
          138  +.\}
          139  +.\}
          140  +.fi
          141  +.br
          142  +.nr ^b 0
          143  +..
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          147  +.de VS
          148  +.if !"\\$2"" .br
          149  +.mk ^Y
          150  +.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
          151  +.el .nr ^v 1u
          152  +..
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          154  +.de VE
          155  +.ie n 'mc
          156  +.el \{\
          157  +.ev 2
          158  +.nf
          159  +.ti 0
          160  +.mk ^t
          161  +\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
          162  +.sp -1
          163  +.fi
          164  +.ev
          165  +.\}
          166  +.nr ^v 0
          167  +..
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
          171  +.de ^B
          172  +.ev 2
          173  +'ti 0
          174  +'nf
          175  +.mk ^t
          176  +.if \\n(^b \{\
          177  +.\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
          178  +.\"	draw two sides but no top otherwise.
          179  +.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
          180  +.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
          181  +.\}
          182  +.if \\n(^v \{\
          183  +.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
          184  +\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
          185  +.\}
          186  +.bp
          187  +'fi
          188  +.ev
          189  +.if \\n(^b \{\
          190  +.mk ^y
          191  +.nr ^b 2
          192  +.\}
          193  +.if \\n(^v \{\
          194  +.mk ^Y
          195  +.\}
          196  +..
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
          198  +.de DS
          199  +.RS
          200  +.nf
          201  +.sp
          202  +..
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
          204  +.de DE
          205  +.fi
          206  +.RE
          207  +.sp
          208  +..
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          210  +.de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
          213  +.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
          214  +.LP
          215  +.nf
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
          217  +.ft B
          218  +..
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          220  +.de SE
          221  +.fi
          222  +.ft R
          223  +.LP
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
          225  +..
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          227  +.de OP
          228  +.LP
          229  +.nf
          230  +.ta 4c
          231  +Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
          232  +Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
          233  +Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
          234  +.fi
          235  +.IP
          236  +..
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          238  +.de CS
          239  +.RS
          240  +.nf
          241  +.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
          242  +..
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          244  +.de CE
          245  +.fi
          246  +.RE
          247  +..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
          249  +.de UL
          250  +\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
          251  +..
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
          274  +.BS
          275  +.SH NAME
          276  +cmdr::tty \- Cmdr - Check if stdin is a tty, i\&.e\&. terminal
          277  +.SH SYNOPSIS
          278  +package require \fBTclx \fR
          279  +.sp
          280  +package require \fBcmdr::tty \fR
          281  +.sp
          282  +\fB::cmdr::tty\fR \fBstdout\fR
          283  +.sp
          284  +.BE
          285  +.SH DESCRIPTION
          286  +.PP
          287  +Welcome to the Cmdr project, written by Andreas Kupries\&.
          288  +.PP
          289  +For availability please read \fICmdr - How To Get The Sources\fR\&.
          290  +.PP
          291  +This package provides a single utility command testing if the
          292  +\fBstdout\fR \fIchannel\fR is a tty or not, and reporting
          293  +the result\&.
          294  +.SH API
          295  +.TP
          296  +\fB::cmdr::tty\fR \fBstdout\fR
          297  +When invoked this command returns a boolean value indicating
          298  +if the \fBstdout\fR \fIchannel\fR is a tty (\fBtrue\fR),
          299  +or not (\fBfalse\fR)\&.
          300  +.PP
          301  +.SH "BUGS, IDEAS, FEEDBACK"
          302  +Both the package(s) and this documentation will undoubtedly contain
          303  +bugs and other problems\&.
          304  +Please report such at
          305  +\fICmdr Tickets\fR [https:/core\&.tcl\&.tk/akupries/cmdr]\&.
          306  +.PP
          307  +Please also report any ideas you may have for enhancements of
          308  +either package(s) and/or documentation\&.
          309  +.SH KEYWORDS
          310  +arguments, command hierarchy, command line completion, command line handling, command tree, editing command line, help for command line, hierarchy of commands, interactive command shell, optional arguments, options, parameters, processing command line, tree of commands
          311  +.SH COPYRIGHT
          312  +.nf
          313  +Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
          314  +Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
          315  +
          316  +.fi

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_util.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_util\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr::util" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr::util" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr::util \- Cmdr - (Internal) General Utilities
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr::util \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   \fB::cmdr::util\fR \fBpadr\fR \fIlist\fR

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_validate.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_validate\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr::validate" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................
   130    137   \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
   131    138   .\}
   132    139   .\}
   133    140   .fi
   134    141   .br
   135    142   .nr ^b 0
   136    143   ..
   137         -'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
   138         -'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
   139         -'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
          144  +.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
          145  +.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
          146  +.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
   140    147   .de VS
   141    148   .if !"\\$2"" .br
   142    149   .mk ^Y
   143    150   .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
   144    151   .el .nr ^v 1u
   145    152   ..
   146         -'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
          153  +.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
   147    154   .de VE
   148    155   .ie n 'mc
   149    156   .el \{\
   150    157   .ev 2
   151    158   .nf
   152    159   .ti 0
   153    160   .mk ^t
................................................................................
   154    161   \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
   155    162   .sp -1
   156    163   .fi
   157    164   .ev
   158    165   .\}
   159    166   .nr ^v 0
   160    167   ..
   161         -'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
   162         -'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
   163         -'\"	# page bottom macro.
          168  +.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
          169  +.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
          170  +.\"	# page bottom macro.
   164    171   .de ^B
   165    172   .ev 2
   166    173   'ti 0
   167    174   'nf
   168    175   .mk ^t
   169    176   .if \\n(^b \{\
   170    177   .\"	Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
................................................................................
   183    190   .mk ^y
   184    191   .nr ^b 2
   185    192   .\}
   186    193   .if \\n(^v \{\
   187    194   .mk ^Y
   188    195   .\}
   189    196   ..
   190         -'\"	# DS - begin display
          197  +.\"	# DS - begin display
   191    198   .de DS
   192    199   .RS
   193    200   .nf
   194    201   .sp
   195    202   ..
   196         -'\"	# DE - end display
          203  +.\"	# DE - end display
   197    204   .de DE
   198    205   .fi
   199    206   .RE
   200    207   .sp
   201    208   ..
   202         -'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
          209  +.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
   203    210   .de SO
          211  +'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
          212  +'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
   204    213   .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
   205    214   .LP
   206    215   .nf
   207         -.ta 4c 8c 12c
          216  +.ta 5.5c 11c
   208    217   .ft B
   209    218   ..
   210         -'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
          219  +.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
   211    220   .de SE
   212    221   .fi
   213    222   .ft R
   214    223   .LP
   215         -See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
          224  +See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
   216    225   ..
   217         -'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
          226  +.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
   218    227   .de OP
   219    228   .LP
   220    229   .nf
   221    230   .ta 4c
   222    231   Command-Line Name:	\\fB\\$1\\fR
   223    232   Database Name:	\\fB\\$2\\fR
   224    233   Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
   225    234   .fi
   226    235   .IP
   227    236   ..
   228         -'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
          237  +.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
   229    238   .de CS
   230    239   .RS
   231    240   .nf
   232    241   .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
   233    242   ..
   234         -'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
          243  +.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
   235    244   .de CE
   236    245   .fi
   237    246   .RE
   238    247   ..
          248  +.\"	# UL - underline word
   239    249   .de UL
   240    250   \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
   241    251   ..
   242         -.TH "cmdr::validate" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
          252  +.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
          253  +.de QW
          254  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
          255  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          256  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
          257  +..
          258  +.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
          259  +.de PQ
          260  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
          261  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          262  +.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
          263  +..
          264  +.\"	# QR - quoted range
          265  +.de QR
          266  +.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
          267  +.\"" fix emacs highlighting
          268  +.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
          269  +..
          270  +.\"	# MT - "empty" string
          271  +.de MT
          272  +.QW ""
          273  +..
   243    274   .BS
   244    275   .SH NAME
   245    276   cmdr::validate \- Cmdr - Standard validation types for parameters
   246    277   .SH SYNOPSIS
   247    278   package require \fBcmdr::validate \fR
   248    279   .sp
   249    280   .BE

Changes to embedded/man/files/cmdr_vcommon.n.

     1      1   '\"
     2      2   '\" Generated from file 'cmdr_vcommon\&.man' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
     3      3   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Andreas Kupries
     4      4   '\" Copyright (c) 2013 Documentation, Andreas Kupries
     5      5   '\"
     6         -'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
     7         -'\" manual entries.
     8         -'\"
     9         -'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
    10         -'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
    11         -'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
    12         -'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
    13         -'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
    14         -'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
    15         -'\"
    16         -'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
    17         -'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
    18         -'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
    19         -'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
    20         -'\"
    21         -'\" .BS
    22         -'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
    23         -'\"	enclosed in one large box.
    24         -'\"
    25         -'\" .BE
    26         -'\"	End of box enclosure.
    27         -'\"
    28         -'\" .CS
    29         -'\"	Begin code excerpt.
    30         -'\"
    31         -'\" .CE
    32         -'\"	End code excerpt.
    33         -'\"
    34         -'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
    35         -'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
    36         -'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
    37         -'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
    38         -'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
    39         -'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
    40         -'\"
    41         -'\" .VE
    42         -'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
    43         -'\"
    44         -'\" .DS
    45         -'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
    46         -'\"
    47         -'\" .DE
    48         -'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
    49         -'\"
    50         -'\" .SO
    51         -'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
    52         -'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
    53         -'\"	by tabs.
    54         -'\"
    55         -'\" .SE
    56         -'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
    57         -'\"
    58         -'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
    59         -'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
    60         -'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
    61         -'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
    62         -'\"	the option's class in the option database.
    63         -'\"
    64         -'\" .UL arg1 arg2
    65         -'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
    66         -'\"
    67         -'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2009/01/30 04:56:47 andreas_kupries Exp $
    68         -'\"
    69         -'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
            6  +.TH "cmdr::validate::common" n 1\&.1 doc "Cmdr, a framework for command line parsing and dispatch"
            7  +.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
            8  +.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
            9  +.\"
           10  +.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
           11  +.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
           12  +.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
           13  +.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
           14  +.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
           15  +.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
           16  +.\"
           17  +.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
           18  +.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
           19  +.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
           20  +.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
           21  +.\"
           22  +.\" .BS
           23  +.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
           24  +.\"	enclosed in one large box.
           25  +.\"
           26  +.\" .BE
           27  +.\"	End of box enclosure.
           28  +.\"
           29  +.\" .CS
           30  +.\"	Begin code excerpt.
           31  +.\"
           32  +.\" .CE
           33  +.\"	End code excerpt.
           34  +.\"
           35  +.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
           36  +.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
           37  +.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
           38  +.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
           39  +.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
           40  +.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
           41  +.\"
           42  +.\" .VE
           43  +.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
           44  +.\"
           45  +.\" .DS
           46  +.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
           47  +.\"
           48  +.\" .DE
           49  +.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
           50  +.\"
           51  +.\" .SO ?manpage?
           52  +.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
           53  +.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
           54  +.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
           55  +.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
           56  +.\"
           57  +.\" .SE
           58  +.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
           59  +.\"
           60  +.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
           61  +.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
           62  +.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
           63  +.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
           64  +.\"	the option's class in the option database.
           65  +.\"
           66  +.\" .UL arg1 arg2
           67  +.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
           68  +.\"
           69  +.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
           70  +.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
           71  +.\"
           72  +.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
           73  +.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
           74  +.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
           75  +.\"
           76  +.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
    70     77   .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
    71     78   .nr ^l \n(.l
    72     79   .ad b
    73         -'\"	# Start an argument description
           80  +.\"	# Start an argument description
    74     81   .de AP
    75     82   .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
    76     83   .el \{\
    77     84   .   ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
    78     85   .   el          .TP 15
    79     86   .\}
    80     87   .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
    81     88   .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
    82         -\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
           89  +\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
    83     90   .\".b
    84     91   .\}
    85     92   .el \{\
    86     93   .br
    87     94   .ie !"\\$2"" \{\
    88     95   \&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP
    89     96   .\}
    90     97   .el \{\
    91     98   \&\\fI\\$1\\fP
    92     99   .\}
    93    100   .\}
    94    101   ..
    95         -'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
          102  +.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
    96    103   .de AS
    97    104   .nr )A 10n
    98    105   .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
    99    106   .nr )B \\n()Au+15n
   100    107   .\"
   101    108   .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
   102    109   .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
   103    110   ..
   104    111   .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
   105         -'\"	# BS - start boxed text
   106         -'\"	# ^y = starting y location
   107         -'\"	# ^b = 1
          112  +.\"	# BS - start boxed text
          113  +.\"	# ^y = starting y location
          114  +.\"	# ^b = 1
   108    115   .de BS
   109    116   .br
   110    117   .mk ^y
   111    118   .nr ^b 1u
   112    119   .if n .nf
   113    120   .if n .ti 0
   114    121   .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
   115    122   .if n .fi
   116    123   ..
   117         -'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
          124  +.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
   118    125   .de BE
   119    126   .nf
   120    127   .ti 0
   121    128   .mk ^t
   122    129   .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
   123    130   .el \{\
   124    131   .\"	Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
................................................................................